blob: 87c0f1a0a13c1beaa7473291bd87452a18a7d355 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
403 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
404 {
405 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
406 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
408 pos.coladd = 0;
409#endif
410 }
411 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
412 }
413
414 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000415 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
417 return (int)col;
418}
419
420#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
421
422static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
423
424/*
425 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
426 */
427 static int
428cin_is_cinword(line)
429 char_u *line;
430{
431 char_u *cinw;
432 char_u *cinw_buf;
433 int cinw_len;
434 int retval = FALSE;
435 int len;
436
437 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
438 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
439 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
440 {
441 line = skipwhite(line);
442 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
443 {
444 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
445 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
446 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
447 {
448 retval = TRUE;
449 break;
450 }
451 }
452 vim_free(cinw_buf);
453 }
454 return retval;
455}
456#endif
457
458/*
459 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
460 *
461 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
462 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
463 *
464 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
465 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
466 * new line.
467 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
468 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
469 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
470 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
471 *
472 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
473 */
474 int
475open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
476 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
477 int flags;
478 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
479{
480 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
481 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
482 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
483 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
484 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
485 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
486 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
487 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
488 int n;
489 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
490 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
491#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
492 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
493 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
494 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
495 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
496#endif
497 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
498#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
499 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
500 char_u *p;
501#endif
502 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
503#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
504 pos_T *pos;
505#endif
506#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
507 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
508# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
509 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
510# endif
511 );
512 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
513 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
514#endif
515#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
516 int vreplace_mode;
517#endif
518 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
519 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
520
521 /*
522 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
523 */
524 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
525 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
526 return FALSE;
527
528#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
529 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
530 {
531 /*
532 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
533 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
534 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
535 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
536 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
537 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
538 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
539 */
540 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
541 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
542 else
543 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
544 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
545 goto theend;
546
547 /*
548 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
549 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
550 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
551 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
552 * etc) a bit later.
553 */
554 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
555 replace_push(NUL);
556 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
557 while (*p != NUL)
558 replace_push(*p++);
559 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
560 }
561#endif
562
563 if ((State & INSERT)
564#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
565 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
566#endif
567 )
568 {
569 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
570#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
571 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
572 {
573 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
574 first_char = *p;
575 }
576#endif
577#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
578 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
579#endif
580 saved_char = *p_extra;
581 *p_extra = NUL;
582 }
583
584 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
585#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
586 did_si = FALSE;
587#endif
588 ai_col = 0;
589
590 /*
591 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
592 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
593 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
594 */
595 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
596 trunc_line = TRUE;
597
598 /*
599 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
600 * indent to use for the new line.
601 */
602 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
603#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
604 || do_si
605#endif
606 )
607 {
608 /*
609 * count white space on current line
610 */
611 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
612 if (newindent == 0)
613 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
614
615#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
616 /*
617 * Do smart indenting.
618 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
619 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
620 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
621 * "if (condition) {"
622 */
623 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
624 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
625 {
626 char_u *ptr;
627 char_u last_char;
628
629 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
630 ptr = saved_line;
631# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
632 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
633 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
634 else
635 lead_len = 0;
636# endif
637 if (dir == FORWARD)
638 {
639 /*
640 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
641 * recognised as comments.
642 */
643 if (
644# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
645 lead_len == 0 &&
646# endif
647 ptr[0] == '#')
648 {
649 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
650 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
651 newindent = get_indent();
652 }
653# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
654 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
655 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
656 else
657 lead_len = 0;
658 if (lead_len > 0)
659 {
660 /*
661 * This case gets the following right:
662 * \*
663 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
664 * *\
665 * #define IN_THE_WAY
666 * This should line up here;
667 */
668 p = skipwhite(ptr);
669 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
670 p++;
671 if (p[0] == '*')
672 {
673 for (p++; *p; p++)
674 {
675 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
676 {
677 /*
678 * End of C comment, indent should line up
679 * with the line containing the start of
680 * the comment
681 */
682 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
683 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
684 {
685 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
686 newindent = get_indent();
687 }
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 else /* Not a comment line */
693# endif
694 {
695 /* Find last non-blank in line */
696 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
697 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
698 --p;
699 last_char = *p;
700
701 /*
702 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
703 */
704 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
705 {
706 if (p > ptr)
707 --p;
708 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
709 --p;
710 }
711 /*
712 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
713 * lines. eg:
714 * if (condition &&
715 * condition) {
716 * Should line up here!
717 * }
718 */
719 if (*p == ')')
720 {
721 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
722 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
723 {
724 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
725 newindent = get_indent();
726 ptr = ml_get_curline();
727 }
728 }
729 /*
730 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
731 * checking for "if" and the like.
732 */
733 if (last_char == '{')
734 {
735 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
736 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
737 }
738 /*
739 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
740 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
741 * '}'.
742 */
743 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
744 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
745 did_si = TRUE;
746 }
747 }
748 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
749 {
750 /*
751 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
752 * recognised as comments.
753 */
754 if (
755# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
756 lead_len == 0 &&
757# endif
758 ptr[0] == '#')
759 {
760 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
761
762 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
763 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
764 {
765 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
766 was_backslashed = TRUE;
767 else
768 was_backslashed = FALSE;
769 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
770 }
771 if (was_backslashed)
772 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
773 else
774 newindent = get_indent();
775 }
776 p = skipwhite(ptr);
777 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
778 did_si = TRUE;
779 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
780 can_si_back = TRUE;
781 }
782 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
783 }
784 if (do_si)
785 can_si = TRUE;
786#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
787
788 did_ai = TRUE;
789 }
790
791#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
792 /*
793 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
794 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
795 */
796 end_comment_pending = NUL;
797 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
798 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
799 else
800 lead_len = 0;
801 if (lead_len > 0)
802 {
803 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
804 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
805 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
806 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
807 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
808 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
809 int current_flag;
810 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
811 char_u *p2;
812
813 /*
814 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
815 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
816 */
817 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
818 {
819 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
820 {
821 require_blank = TRUE;
822 continue;
823 }
824 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
825 {
826 current_flag = *p;
827 if (*p == COM_START)
828 {
829 /*
830 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
831 */
832 if (dir == BACKWARD)
833 {
834 lead_len = 0;
835 break;
836 }
837
838 /* find start of middle part */
839 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
840 require_blank = FALSE;
841 }
842
843 /*
844 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
845 */
846 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
847 {
848 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
849 require_blank = TRUE;
850 ++p;
851 }
852 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
853
854 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
855 {
856 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
857 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
858 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
859 ++p;
860 }
861 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
862
863 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
864 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
865
866 /*
867 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
868 * the comment leader.
869 */
870 if (dir == FORWARD)
871 {
872 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
873 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
874 {
875 comment_end = p;
876 lead_len = 0;
877 break;
878 }
879 }
880
881 /*
882 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
883 */
884 if (lead_len > 0)
885 {
886 if (current_flag == COM_START)
887 {
888 lead_repl = lead_middle;
889 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
890 }
891
892 /*
893 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
894 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
895 * comment leader on the next line.
896 */
897 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
898 && ((p_extra != NULL
899 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
900 || (p_extra == NULL
901 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
902 || require_blank))
903 extra_space = TRUE;
904 }
905 break;
906 }
907 if (*p == COM_END)
908 {
909 /*
910 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
911 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
912 * start (for C-comments).
913 */
914 if (dir == FORWARD)
915 {
916 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
917 lead_len = 0;
918 break;
919 }
920
921 /*
922 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
923 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
924 */
925 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
926 --p;
927 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
928 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
929 ;
930 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
931
932 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
933 * the comment-end */
934 extra_space = TRUE;
935
936 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
937 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
938 {
939 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
940 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
941 }
942 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
943 {
944 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
945 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
946 p2++;
947 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
948 }
949 break;
950 }
951 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
952 {
953 /*
954 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
955 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
956 */
957 if (dir == BACKWARD)
958 lead_len = 0;
959 else
960 {
961 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
962 lead_repl_len = 0;
963 }
964 break;
965 }
966 }
967 if (lead_len)
968 {
969 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
970 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
971 extra_len + 1);
972 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
973
974 if (leader == NULL)
975 lead_len = 0;
976 else
977 {
978 STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
979 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
1075 l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 int l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
2185 count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002464}
2465
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002466static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2467static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2469
2470/*
2471 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2472 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2473 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2474 * - invalidates cached values
2475 */
2476 void
2477changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2478 linenr_T lnum;
2479 colnr_T col;
2480{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002481 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002482 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002483
2484#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2485 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2486 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2487 {
2488 win_T *wp;
2489 linenr_T wlnum;
2490
2491 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2492 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2493 {
2494 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2495 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2496 if (wlnum > 0)
2497 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2498 }
2499 }
2500#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002501}
2502
2503 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002504changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2505 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506 linenr_T lnum;
2507{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002508 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002509 {
2510 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002511 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2512 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2513 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2514 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515 }
2516 else
2517 {
2518 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002519 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2520 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2522 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002523 }
2524}
2525
2526/*
2527 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2528 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2529 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2530 */
2531 void
2532appended_lines(lnum, count)
2533 linenr_T lnum;
2534 long count;
2535{
2536 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2537}
2538
2539/*
2540 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2541 */
2542 void
2543appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2544 linenr_T lnum;
2545 long count;
2546{
2547 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2548 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2549}
2550
2551/*
2552 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2553 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2554 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2555 */
2556 void
2557deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2558 linenr_T lnum;
2559 long count;
2560{
2561 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2562}
2563
2564/*
2565 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2566 */
2567 void
2568deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2569 linenr_T lnum;
2570 long count;
2571{
2572 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2573 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2574}
2575
2576/*
2577 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2578 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2579 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2580 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2581 * - invalidate cached values
2582 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2583 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2584 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2585 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2586 */
2587 void
2588changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2589 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2590 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2591 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2592 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2593{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002594 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2595
2596#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2597 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2598 {
2599 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2600 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2601 * displaying. */
2602 win_T *wp;
2603 linenr_T wlnum;
2604
2605 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2606 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2607 {
2608 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2609 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2610 if (wlnum > 0)
2611 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2612 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2613 }
2614 }
2615#endif
2616
2617 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2618}
2619
2620 static void
2621changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2622 buf_T *buf;
2623 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2624 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2625 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2626{
2627 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628 {
2629 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002630 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2631 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2632 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002633 {
2634 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002635 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2636 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2637 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002638 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002639 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2641 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002642 }
2643 else
2644 {
2645 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002646 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2647 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2649 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002650 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651}
2652
2653 static void
2654changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2655 linenr_T lnum;
2656 colnr_T col;
2657 linenr_T lnume;
2658 long xtra;
2659{
2660 win_T *wp;
2661 int i;
2662#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2663 int cols;
2664 pos_T *p;
2665 int add;
2666#endif
2667
2668 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2669 changed();
2670
2671 /* set the '. mark */
2672 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2673 {
2674 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2676
2677#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2678 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2679 * don't have an entry yet. */
2680 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2681 {
2682 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2683 add = TRUE;
2684 else
2685 {
2686 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2687 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2688 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2689 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2690 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2691 add = TRUE;
2692 else
2693 {
2694 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2695 if (cols == 0)
2696 cols = 79;
2697 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2698 }
2699 }
2700 if (add)
2701 {
2702 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2703 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2704 * position in the changelist. */
2705 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2706
2707 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2708 {
2709 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2710 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2711 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2712 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2713 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2714 {
2715 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2716 * this buffer. */
2717 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2718 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2719 }
2720 }
2721 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2722 {
2723 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2724 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2725 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2726 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2727 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2728 }
2729 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2730 }
2731 }
2732 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2733 curbuf->b_last_change;
2734 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2735 * takes you back to it. */
2736 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2737#endif
2738 }
2739
2740 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2741 {
2742 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2743 {
2744 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2745 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2746 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2747
2748 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2749 * values for the cursor. */
2750#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2751 /*
2752 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2753 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2754 */
2755 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2756
2757 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2758 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2759 * might be displayed differently.
2760 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2761 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2762 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2763 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2764 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2768
2769 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2770 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2771 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2772 {
2773 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2774 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2775 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2776 }
2777#endif
2778
2779 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2780 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2781 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2782 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2783 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2784 {
2785 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2786 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2787 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2788 }
2789
2790 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2791 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2792 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2793 * after the change. */
2794 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2795 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2796 {
2797 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2798 {
2799 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2800 {
2801 /* line included in change */
2802 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2803 }
2804 else if (xtra != 0)
2805 {
2806 /* line below change */
2807 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2808#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2810#endif
2811 }
2812 }
2813#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2814 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2815 {
2816 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2817 * may need to be redrawn */
2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2819 }
2820#endif
2821 }
2822 }
2823 }
2824
2825 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2826 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2827 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2828 must_redraw = VALID;
2829}
2830
2831/*
2832 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2833 */
2834 void
2835unchanged(buf, ff)
2836 buf_T *buf;
2837 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2838{
2839 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2840 {
2841 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002842 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843 if (ff)
2844 save_file_ff(buf);
2845#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2846 check_status(buf);
2847#endif
2848#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2849 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2850#endif
2851 }
2852 ++buf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002853#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2854 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2855#endif
2856}
2857
2858#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2859/*
2860 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2861 * need to be updated
2862 */
2863 void
2864check_status(buf)
2865 buf_T *buf;
2866{
2867 win_T *wp;
2868
2869 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2870 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2871 {
2872 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2873 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2874 must_redraw = VALID;
2875 }
2876}
2877#endif
2878
2879/*
2880 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2881 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2882 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2883 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2884 * will be TRUE.
2885 */
2886 void
2887change_warning(col)
2888 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2889 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2890{
2891 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2892 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2893#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2894 && !autocmd_busy
2895#endif
2896 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2897 {
2898#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2899 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2900 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2901 return;
2902#endif
2903 /*
2904 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2905 * be after the mode message.
2906 */
2907 msg_start();
2908 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2909 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002910 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2912 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2913 msg_clr_eos();
2914 (void)msg_end();
2915 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2916 {
2917 out_flush();
2918 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2919 }
2920 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2921 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2922 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2923 showmode();
2924 }
2925}
2926
2927/*
2928 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2929 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2930 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2931 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2932 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2933 *
2934 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2935 */
2936 int
2937ask_yesno(str, direct)
2938 char_u *str;
2939 int direct;
2940{
2941 int r = ' ';
2942 int save_State = State;
2943
2944 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2945 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2946 ++no_wait_return;
2947#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2948 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2949#endif
2950 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2951#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2952 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2953#endif
2954 ++no_mapping;
2955 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2956
2957 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2958 {
2959 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2960 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2961 if (direct)
2962 r = get_keystroke();
2963 else
2964 r = safe_vgetc();
2965 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2966 r = 'n';
2967 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2968 out_flush();
2969 }
2970 --no_wait_return;
2971 State = save_State;
2972#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2973 setmouse();
2974#endif
2975 --no_mapping;
2976 --allow_keys;
2977
2978 return r;
2979}
2980
2981/*
2982 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2983 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2984 * button (used at the more prompt).
2985 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2986 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2987 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2988 */
2989 int
2990get_keystroke()
2991{
2992#define CBUFLEN 151
2993 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2994 int len = 0;
2995 int n;
2996 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2997
2998 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
2999 for (;;)
3000 {
3001 cursor_on();
3002 out_flush();
3003
3004 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3005 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3006 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3007 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3008 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3009 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3010 if (n > 0)
3011 {
3012 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3013 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3014 len += n;
3015 }
3016
3017 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3018 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3019 continue;
3020 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3021 if (n > 0)
3022 len = n;
3023 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3024 continue;
3025
3026 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3027 n = buf[0];
3028 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3029 {
3030 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3031 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3032 || n == K_IGNORE
3033#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3034 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3035 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3036 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3037 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3038 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3039 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3040 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3041 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3042 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3043 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3044 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3045 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3046 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3047 || n == K_X1DRAG
3048 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3049 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3050 || n == K_X2DRAG
3051 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3052# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3053 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3054 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3055# endif
3056#endif
3057 )
3058 {
3059 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3060 mod_mask = buf[2];
3061 len -= 3;
3062 if (len > 0)
3063 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3064 continue;
3065 }
3066 }
3067#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3068 if (has_mbyte)
3069 {
3070 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3071 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3072 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3073 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3074 }
3075#endif
3076#ifdef UNIX
3077 if (n == intr_char)
3078 n = ESC;
3079#endif
3080 break;
3081 }
3082
3083 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3084 return n;
3085}
3086
3087/*
3088 * get a number from the user
3089 */
3090 int
3091get_number(colon)
3092 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3093{
3094 int n = 0;
3095 int c;
3096
3097 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3098 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3099 if (msg_silent != 0)
3100 return 0;
3101
3102#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3103 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3104#endif
3105 ++no_mapping;
3106 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3107 for (;;)
3108 {
3109 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3110 c = safe_vgetc();
3111 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3112 {
3113 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3114 msg_putchar(c);
3115 }
3116 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3117 {
3118 n /= 10;
3119 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3120 }
3121 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3122 {
3123 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3124 if (!exmode_active)
3125 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3126 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3127 do_redraw = FALSE;
3128 break;
3129 }
3130 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3131 break;
3132 }
3133 --no_mapping;
3134 --allow_keys;
3135 return n;
3136}
3137
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003138/*
3139 * Ask the user to enter a number.
3140 */
3141 int
3142prompt_for_number()
3143{
3144 int i;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003145 int save_cmdline_row;
3146 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003147
3148 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3149 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003150
3151 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3152 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3153 cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3154 save_State = State;
3155 State = CMDLINE;
3156
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003157 i = get_number(TRUE);
3158 if (KeyTyped) /* don't call wait_return() now */
3159 {
3160 msg_putchar('\n');
3161 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3162 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3163 msg_didany = FALSE;
3164 }
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003165 else
3166 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3167 State = save_State;
3168
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003169 return i;
3170}
3171
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003172 void
3173msgmore(n)
3174 long n;
3175{
3176 long pn;
3177
3178 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003179 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3180 return;
3181
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003182 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3183 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3184 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3185 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3186 return;
3187
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003188 if (n > 0)
3189 pn = n;
3190 else
3191 pn = -n;
3192
3193 if (pn > p_report)
3194 {
3195 if (pn == 1)
3196 {
3197 if (n > 0)
3198 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3199 else
3200 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3201 }
3202 else
3203 {
3204 if (n > 0)
3205 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3206 else
3207 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3208 }
3209 if (got_int)
3210 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3211 if (msg(msg_buf))
3212 {
3213 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3214 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003215 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003216 }
3217 }
3218}
3219
3220/*
3221 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3222 */
3223 void
3224beep_flush()
3225{
3226 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3227 {
3228 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3229 vim_beep();
3230 }
3231}
3232
3233/*
3234 * give a warning for an error
3235 */
3236 void
3237vim_beep()
3238{
3239 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3240 {
3241 if (p_vb
3242#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3243 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3244 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3245 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3246#endif
3247 )
3248 {
3249 out_str(T_VB);
3250 }
3251 else
3252 {
3253#ifdef MSDOS
3254 /*
3255 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3256 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3257 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3258 */
3259 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3260 {
3261 out_char(BELL);
3262 beep_count = 1;
3263 }
3264 else
3265 ++beep_count;
3266#else
3267 out_char(BELL);
3268#endif
3269 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003270
3271 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3272 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3273 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3274 {
3275 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3276 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3277 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003278 }
3279}
3280
3281/*
3282 * To get the "real" home directory:
3283 * - get value of $HOME
3284 * For Unix:
3285 * - go to that directory
3286 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3287 * This also works with mounts and links.
3288 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3289 */
3290static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3291
3292 void
3293init_homedir()
3294{
3295 char_u *var;
3296
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003297 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3298 vim_free(homedir);
3299 homedir = NULL;
3300
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003301#ifdef VMS
3302 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3303#else
3304 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3305#endif
3306
3307 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3308 var = NULL;
3309
3310#ifdef WIN3264
3311 /*
3312 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3313 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3314 * when $HOME is being set.
3315 */
3316 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3317 {
3318 char_u *p;
3319 char_u *exp;
3320
3321 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3322 if (p != NULL)
3323 {
3324 STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3325 NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3326 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3327 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3328 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3329 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003330 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003331 var = NameBuff;
3332 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3333 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3334 }
3335 }
3336 }
3337
3338 /*
3339 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3340 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3341 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3342 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3343 */
3344 if (var == NULL)
3345 {
3346 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3347
3348 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3349 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3350 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3351 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3352 {
3353 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3354 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3355 {
3356 var = NameBuff;
3357 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3358 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3359 }
3360 }
3361 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003362
3363# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3364 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3365 {
3366 int len;
3367 char_u *pp;
3368
3369 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3370 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3371 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3372 if (pp != NULL)
3373 {
3374 homedir = pp;
3375 return;
3376 }
3377 }
3378# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003379#endif
3380
3381#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3382 /*
3383 * Default home dir is C:/
3384 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3385 */
3386 if (var == NULL)
3387 var = "C:/";
3388#endif
3389 if (var != NULL)
3390 {
3391#ifdef UNIX
3392 /*
3393 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3394 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3395 */
3396 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3397 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3398 {
3399 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3400 var = IObuff;
3401 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3402 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3403 }
3404#endif
3405 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3406 }
3407}
3408
Bram Moolenaarf461c8e2005-06-25 23:04:51 +00003409#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3410 void
3411free_homedir()
3412{
3413 vim_free(homedir);
3414}
3415#endif
3416
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003417/*
3418 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3419 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3420 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3421 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3422 */
3423 void
3424expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3425 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3426 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3427 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3428{
3429 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3430}
3431
3432 void
3433expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3434 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3435 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3436 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3437 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3438{
3439 char_u *tail;
3440 int c;
3441 char_u *var;
3442 int copy_char;
3443 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3444 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3445
3446 src = skipwhite(src);
3447 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3448 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3449 {
3450 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003451 if ((*src == '$'
3452#ifdef VMS
3453 && at_start
3454#endif
3455 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003456#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3457 || *src == '%'
3458#endif
3459 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3460 {
3461 mustfree = FALSE;
3462
3463 /*
3464 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3465 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3466 */
3467 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3468 {
3469 tail = src + 1;
3470 var = dst;
3471 c = dstlen - 1;
3472
3473#ifdef UNIX
3474 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3475 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3476 {
3477 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3478 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3479 *var++ = *tail++;
3480 }
3481 else
3482#endif
3483 {
3484 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3485#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3486 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3487#endif
3488 ))
3489 {
3490#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3491 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3492 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3493#else
3494 *var++ = *tail++;
3495#endif
3496 }
3497 }
3498
3499#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3500# ifdef UNIX
3501 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3502# else
3503 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3504# endif
3505 var = NULL;
3506 else
3507 {
3508# ifdef UNIX
3509 if (src[1] == '{')
3510# else
3511 if (*src == '%')
3512#endif
3513 ++tail;
3514#endif
3515 *var = NUL;
3516 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3517#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3518 }
3519#endif
3520 }
3521 /* home directory */
3522 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3523 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3524 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3525 {
3526 var = homedir;
3527 tail = src + 1;
3528 }
3529 else /* user directory */
3530 {
3531#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3532 /*
3533 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3534 */
3535 tail = src;
3536 var = dst;
3537 c = dstlen - 1;
3538 while ( c-- > 0
3539 && *tail
3540 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3541 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3542 *var++ = *tail++;
3543 *var = NUL;
3544# ifdef UNIX
3545 /*
3546 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3547 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3548 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3549 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3550 */
3551# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3552 {
3553 struct passwd *pw;
3554
3555 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3556 if (pw != NULL)
3557 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3558 else
3559 var = NULL;
3560 }
3561 if (var == NULL)
3562# endif
3563 {
3564 expand_T xpc;
3565
3566 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3567 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3568 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3569 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3570 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3571 mustfree = TRUE;
3572 }
3573
3574# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3575 /*
3576 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3577 * directories to search for the user account in.
3578 */
3579 {
3580 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3581 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3582 struct stat st;
3583
3584 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3585 next_path = paths;
3586 while (*next_path)
3587 {
3588 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3589 next_path++);
3590 if (*next_path)
3591 *next_path++ = NUL;
3592 STRCPY(test, path);
3593 STRCAT(test, "/");
3594 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3595 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3596 {
3597 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3598 STRCPY(var, test);
3599 mustfree = TRUE;
3600 break;
3601 }
3602 }
3603 }
3604# endif /* UNIX */
3605#else
3606 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3607 var = NULL;
3608 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3609#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3610 }
3611
3612#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3613 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3614 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3615 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3616 {
3617 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3618
3619 if (p != NULL)
3620 {
3621 if (mustfree)
3622 vim_free(var);
3623 var = p;
3624 mustfree = TRUE;
3625 forward_slash(var);
3626 }
3627 }
3628#endif
3629
3630 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3631 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3632 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3633 {
3634 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3635
3636 if (p != NULL)
3637 {
3638 if (mustfree)
3639 vim_free(var);
3640 var = p;
3641 mustfree = TRUE;
3642 }
3643 }
3644
3645 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3646 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3647 {
3648 STRCPY(dst, var);
3649 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003650 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003651 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3652 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003653 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003654#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3655 && dst[-1] != ':'
3656#endif
3657 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3658 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003659 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003660 src = tail;
3661 copy_char = FALSE;
3662 }
3663 if (mustfree)
3664 vim_free(var);
3665 }
3666
3667 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3668 {
3669 /*
3670 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3671 */
3672 at_start = FALSE;
3673 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3674 {
3675 *dst++ = *src++;
3676 --dstlen;
3677 }
3678 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3679 at_start = TRUE;
3680 *dst++ = *src++;
3681 --dstlen;
3682 }
3683 }
3684 *dst = NUL;
3685}
3686
3687/*
3688 * Vim's version of getenv().
3689 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003690 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003691 */
3692 char_u *
3693vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3694 char_u *name;
3695 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3696{
3697 char_u *p;
3698 char_u *pend;
3699 int vimruntime;
3700
3701#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3702 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3703 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3704 return homedir;
3705#endif
3706
3707 p = mch_getenv(name);
3708 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3709 p = NULL;
3710
3711 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003712 {
3713#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3714 if (enc_utf8)
3715 {
3716 int len;
3717 char_u *pp;
3718
3719 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3720 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3721 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3722 if (pp != NULL)
3723 {
3724 p = pp;
3725 *mustfree = TRUE;
3726 }
3727 }
3728#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003729 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003730 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003731
3732 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3733 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3734 return NULL;
3735
3736 /*
3737 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3738 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3739 */
3740 if (vimruntime
3741#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3742 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3743#endif
3744 )
3745 {
3746 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3747 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3748 p = NULL;
3749 if (p != NULL)
3750 {
3751 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3752 if (p != NULL)
3753 *mustfree = TRUE;
3754 else
3755 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003756
3757#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3758 if (enc_utf8)
3759 {
3760 int len;
3761 char_u *pp;
3762
3763 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3764 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3765 * characters. */
3766 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3767 if (pp != NULL)
3768 {
3769 if (mustfree)
3770 vim_free(p);
3771 p = pp;
3772 *mustfree = TRUE;
3773 }
3774 }
3775#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003776 }
3777 }
3778
3779 /*
3780 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3781 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3782 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3783 */
3784 if (p == NULL)
3785 {
3786 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3787 p = p_hf;
3788#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3789 /*
3790 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3791 */
3792 else
3793 p = exe_name;
3794#endif
3795 if (p != NULL)
3796 {
3797 /* remove the file name */
3798 pend = gettail(p);
3799
3800 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3801 if (p == p_hf)
3802 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3803
3804#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3805# ifdef MACOS_X
3806 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3807 if (p == exe_name)
3808 {
3809 char_u *pend1;
3810 char_u *pend2;
3811
3812 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3813 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3814 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3815 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3816 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3817 if (pend2 == pend)
3818 pend = pend1;
3819 }
3820# endif
3821 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3822 if (p == exe_name)
3823 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3824#endif
3825
3826 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3827 if (!vimruntime)
3828 {
3829 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3830 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3831 }
3832
3833 /* remove trailing path separator */
3834#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3835 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3836 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003837 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003838 --pend;
3839#endif
3840
3841 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3842 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3843
3844 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3845 {
3846 vim_free(p);
3847 p = NULL;
3848 }
3849 else
3850 {
3851#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3852 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3853 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3854 {
3855 vim_free(p);
3856 p = pend;
3857 }
3858#endif
3859 *mustfree = TRUE;
3860 }
3861 }
3862 }
3863
3864#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3865 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3866 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3867 if (p == NULL)
3868 {
3869 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3870 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3871 {
3872 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3873 *mustfree = FALSE;
3874 }
3875 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3876 {
3877 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3878 *mustfree = TRUE;
3879 else
3880 {
3881 p = default_vim_dir;
3882 *mustfree = FALSE;
3883 }
3884 }
3885 }
3886#endif
3887
3888 /*
3889 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3890 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3891 */
3892 if (p != NULL)
3893 {
3894 if (vimruntime)
3895 {
3896 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3897 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3898#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3899 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003900 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003901
3902 if (buf != NULL)
3903 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003904 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3905 vim_free(buf);
3906 }
3907 }
3908#endif
3909 }
3910 else
3911 {
3912 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3913 didset_vim = TRUE;
3914 }
3915 }
3916 return p;
3917}
3918
3919/*
3920 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3921 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3922 */
3923 static char_u *
3924vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3925 char_u *vimdir;
3926{
3927 char_u *p;
3928
3929 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3930 return NULL;
3931 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3932 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3933 return p;
3934 vim_free(p);
3935 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3936 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3937 return p;
3938 vim_free(p);
3939 return NULL;
3940}
3941
3942/*
3943 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3944 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3945 */
3946 static char_u *
3947remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3948 char_u *p;
3949 char_u *pend;
3950 char_u *name;
3951{
3952 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3953 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3954
3955 if (newend >= p
3956 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003957 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003958 return newend;
3959 return pend;
3960}
3961
3962#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3963/*
3964 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3965 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3966 */
3967 static char_u *
3968remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3969 char_u *p;
3970 char_u *pend;
3971 char_u *ext;
3972{
3973 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3974 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3975
3976 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00003977 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
3978 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
3979 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003980 return newend;
3981 return pend;
3982}
3983#endif
3984
3985/*
3986 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3987 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3988 * again soon.
3989 */
3990 char_u *
3991expand_env_save(src)
3992 char_u *src;
3993{
3994 char_u *p;
3995
3996 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3997 if (p != NULL)
3998 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3999 return p;
4000}
4001
4002/*
4003 * Our portable version of setenv.
4004 */
4005 void
4006vim_setenv(name, val)
4007 char_u *name;
4008 char_u *val;
4009{
4010#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4011 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4012#else
4013 char_u *envbuf;
4014
4015 /*
4016 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4017 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
4018 */
4019 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4020 if (envbuf != NULL)
4021 {
4022 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4023 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4024 }
4025#endif
4026}
4027
4028#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4029/*
4030 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4031 */
4032/*ARGSUSED*/
4033 char_u *
4034get_env_name(xp, idx)
4035 expand_T *xp;
4036 int idx;
4037{
4038# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4039 /*
4040 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4041 */
4042 return NULL;
4043# else
4044# ifndef __WIN32__
4045 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4046 extern char **environ;
4047# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004048# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4049 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004050 char_u *str;
4051 int n;
4052
4053 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4054 if (str == NULL)
4055 return NULL;
4056
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004057 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004058 {
4059 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4060 break;
4061 name[n] = str[n];
4062 }
4063 name[n] = NUL;
4064 return name;
4065# endif
4066}
4067#endif
4068
4069/*
4070 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4071 * 'src'.
4072 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4073 */
4074 void
4075home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4076 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4077 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4078 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4079 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4080 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4081 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4082{
4083 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4084 size_t len;
4085 char_u *homedir_env;
4086 char_u *p;
4087
4088 if (src == NULL)
4089 {
4090 *dst = NUL;
4091 return;
4092 }
4093
4094 /*
4095 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4096 */
4097 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4098 {
4099 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4100 return;
4101 }
4102
4103 /*
4104 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4105 * "real" home directory.
4106 */
4107 if (homedir != NULL)
4108 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4109
4110#ifdef VMS
4111 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4112#else
4113 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4114#endif
4115
4116 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4117 homedir_env = NULL;
4118 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4119 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4120
4121 if (!one)
4122 src = skipwhite(src);
4123 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4124 {
4125 /*
4126 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4127 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4128 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4129 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4130 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4131 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4132 * er's home directory)).
4133 */
4134 p = homedir;
4135 len = dirlen;
4136 for (;;)
4137 {
4138 if ( len
4139 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4140 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4141 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4142 || src[len] == NUL))
4143 {
4144 src += len;
4145 if (--dstlen > 0)
4146 *dst++ = '~';
4147
4148 /*
4149 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4150 */
4151 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4152 *dst++ = '/';
4153 break;
4154 }
4155 if (p == homedir_env)
4156 break;
4157 p = homedir_env;
4158 len = envlen;
4159 }
4160
4161 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4162 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4163 *dst++ = *src++;
4164 /* skip separator */
4165 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4166 *dst++ = *src++;
4167 }
4168 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4169
4170 *dst = NUL;
4171}
4172
4173/*
4174 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4175 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4176 */
4177 char_u *
4178home_replace_save(buf, src)
4179 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4180 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4181{
4182 char_u *dst;
4183 unsigned len;
4184
4185 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4186 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4187 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4188 dst = alloc(len);
4189 if (dst != NULL)
4190 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4191 return dst;
4192}
4193
4194/*
4195 * Compare two file names and return:
4196 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4197 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4198 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4199 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4200 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4201 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4202 */
4203 int
4204fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4205 char_u *s1, *s2;
4206 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4207{
4208#ifdef UNIX
4209 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4210 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4211 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4212 struct stat st1, st2;
4213 int r1, r2;
4214
4215 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4216 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4217 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4218 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4219 {
4220 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4221 if (checkname)
4222 {
4223 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4224 return FPC_SAMEX;
4225 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4226 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4227 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4228 return FPC_SAMEX;
4229 }
4230 return FPC_NOTX;
4231 }
4232 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4233 return FPC_DIFFX;
4234 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4235 return FPC_SAME;
4236 return FPC_DIFF;
4237#else
4238 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4239 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4240 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4241 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4242 int r1, r2;
4243
4244 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4245 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4246 {
4247 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4248 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4249
4250 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4251 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4252 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4253
4254 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4255 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4256 {
4257 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4258 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4259 else
4260 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4261 }
4262 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4263 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4264 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4265 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4266 else
4267 retval = FPC_SAME;
4268 vim_free(exp1);
4269 }
4270 return retval;
4271#endif
4272}
4273
4274/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004275 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4276 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004277 */
4278 char_u *
4279gettail(fname)
4280 char_u *fname;
4281{
4282 char_u *p1, *p2;
4283
4284 if (fname == NULL)
4285 return (char_u *)"";
4286 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4287 {
4288 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4289 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004290 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004291 }
4292 return p1;
4293}
4294
4295/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004296 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4297 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4298 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4299 */
4300 char_u *
4301gettail_sep(fname)
4302 char_u *fname;
4303{
4304 char_u *p;
4305 char_u *t;
4306
4307 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4308 t = gettail(fname);
4309 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4310 --t;
4311#ifdef VMS
4312 /* path separator is part of the path */
4313 ++t;
4314#endif
4315 return t;
4316}
4317
4318/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004319 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4320 */
4321 char_u *
4322getnextcomp(fname)
4323 char_u *fname;
4324{
4325 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004326 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004327 if (*fname)
4328 ++fname;
4329 return fname;
4330}
4331
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004332/*
4333 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4334 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4335 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4336 */
4337 char_u *
4338get_past_head(path)
4339 char_u *path;
4340{
4341 char_u *retval;
4342
4343#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4344 /* may skip "c:" */
4345 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4346 retval = path + 2;
4347 else
4348 retval = path;
4349#else
4350# if defined(AMIGA)
4351 /* may skip "label:" */
4352 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4353 if (retval == NULL)
4354 retval = path;
4355# else /* Unix */
4356 retval = path;
4357# endif
4358#endif
4359
4360 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4361 ++retval;
4362
4363 return retval;
4364}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004365
4366/*
4367 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4368 */
4369 int
4370vim_ispathsep(c)
4371 int c;
4372{
4373#ifdef RISCOS
4374 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4375#else
4376# ifdef UNIX
4377 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4378# else
4379# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4380 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4381# else
4382# ifdef VMS
4383 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4384 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4385 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4386# else
4387# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4388 return (c == ':');
4389# else /* Amiga */
4390 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4391# endif
4392# endif /* VMS */
4393# endif
4394# endif
4395#endif /* RISC OS */
4396}
4397
4398#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4399/*
4400 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4401 */
4402 int
4403vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4404 int c;
4405{
4406#ifdef UNIX
4407 return (c == ':');
4408#else
4409 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4410#endif
4411}
4412#endif
4413
4414#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4415 || defined(PROTO)
4416/*
4417 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4418 */
4419 int
4420vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4421 char_u *x, *y;
4422{
4423 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4424}
4425
4426 int
4427vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4428 char_u *x, *y;
4429 size_t len;
4430{
4431 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4432 {
4433 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4434 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4435 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4436 break;
4437 ++x;
4438 ++y;
4439 --len;
4440 }
4441 if (len == 0)
4442 return 0;
4443 return (*x - *y);
4444}
4445#endif
4446
4447/*
4448 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4449 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4450 */
4451 char_u *
4452concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4453 char_u *fname1;
4454 char_u *fname2;
4455 int sep;
4456{
4457 char_u *dest;
4458
4459 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4460 if (dest != NULL)
4461 {
4462 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4463 if (sep)
4464 add_pathsep(dest);
4465 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4466 }
4467 return dest;
4468}
4469
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004470#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4471/*
4472 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4473 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4474 */
4475 char_u *
4476concat_str(str1, str2)
4477 char_u *str1;
4478 char_u *str2;
4479{
4480 char_u *dest;
4481 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4482
4483 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4484 if (dest != NULL)
4485 {
4486 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4487 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4488 }
4489 return dest;
4490}
4491#endif
4492
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004493/*
4494 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4495 * separator.
4496 */
4497 void
4498add_pathsep(p)
4499 char_u *p;
4500{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004501 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004502 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4503}
4504
4505/*
4506 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4507 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4508 */
4509 char_u *
4510FullName_save(fname, force)
4511 char_u *fname;
4512 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4513 like a full path name */
4514{
4515 char_u *buf;
4516 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4517
4518 if (fname == NULL)
4519 return NULL;
4520
4521 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4522 if (buf != NULL)
4523 {
4524 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4525 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4526 else
4527 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4528 vim_free(buf);
4529 }
4530 return new_fname;
4531}
4532
4533#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4534
4535static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4536
4537/*
4538 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4539 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4540 */
4541 pos_T *
4542find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4543 int ind_maxcomment;
4544{
4545 pos_T *pos;
4546 char_u *line;
4547 char_u *p;
4548
4549 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4550 return NULL;
4551
4552 /*
4553 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4554 */
4555 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4556 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4557 p = skip_string(p);
4558 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4559 return NULL;
4560 return pos;
4561}
4562
4563/*
4564 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4565 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4566 */
4567 static char_u *
4568skip_string(p)
4569 char_u *p;
4570{
4571 int i;
4572
4573 /*
4574 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4575 */
4576 for ( ; ; ++p)
4577 {
4578 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4579 {
4580 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4581 break;
4582 i = 2;
4583 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4584 {
4585 ++i;
4586 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4587 ++i;
4588 }
4589 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4590 {
4591 p += i;
4592 continue;
4593 }
4594 }
4595 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4596 {
4597 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4598 {
4599 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4600 ++p;
4601 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4602 break;
4603 }
4604 if (p[0] == '"')
4605 continue;
4606 }
4607 break; /* no string found */
4608 }
4609 if (!*p)
4610 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4611 return p;
4612}
4613#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4614
4615#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4616
4617/*
4618 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4619 */
4620 void
4621do_c_expr_indent()
4622{
4623# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4624 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4625 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4626 else
4627# endif
4628 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4629}
4630
4631/*
4632 * Functions for C-indenting.
4633 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4634 */
4635/*
4636 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4637 */
4638
4639static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4640static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4641static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4642static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4643static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4644static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4645static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4646static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4647static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4648static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4649static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4650static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4651static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4652static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4653static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4654static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4655static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4656static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4657static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4658static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4659static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4660static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4661static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4662static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4663static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4664static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4665static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4666static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4667static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4668static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4669
4670/*
4671 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4672 */
4673 static char_u *
4674cin_skipcomment(s)
4675 char_u *s;
4676{
4677 while (*s)
4678 {
4679 s = skipwhite(s);
4680 if (*s != '/')
4681 break;
4682 ++s;
4683 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4684 {
4685 s += STRLEN(s);
4686 break;
4687 }
4688 if (*s != '*')
4689 break;
4690 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4691 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4692 {
4693 s += 2;
4694 break;
4695 }
4696 }
4697 return s;
4698}
4699
4700/*
4701 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4702 * not considered code.
4703 */
4704 static int
4705cin_nocode(s)
4706 char_u *s;
4707{
4708 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4709}
4710
4711/*
4712 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4713 */
4714 static pos_T *
4715find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4716{
4717 static pos_T pos;
4718 char_u *line;
4719 char_u *p;
4720
4721 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4722 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4723 {
4724 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4725 p = skipwhite(line);
4726 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4727 {
4728 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4729 return &pos;
4730 }
4731 if (*p != NUL)
4732 break;
4733 }
4734 return NULL;
4735}
4736
4737/*
4738 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4739 */
4740 static int
4741cin_islabel_skip(s)
4742 char_u **s;
4743{
4744 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4745 return FALSE;
4746
4747 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4748 (*s)++;
4749
4750 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4751
4752 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4753 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4754}
4755
4756/*
4757 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4758 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4759 */
4760 int
4761cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4762 int ind_maxcomment;
4763{
4764 char_u *s;
4765
4766 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4767
4768 /*
4769 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4770 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4771 */
4772 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4773 return FALSE;
4774 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4775 return FALSE;
4776
4777 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4778 {
4779 /*
4780 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4781 * label.
4782 */
4783 pos_T cursor_save;
4784 pos_T *trypos;
4785 char_u *line;
4786
4787 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4788 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4789 {
4790 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4791
4792 /*
4793 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4794 */
4795 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4796 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4797 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4798
4799 line = ml_get_curline();
4800 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4801 continue;
4802 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4803 continue;
4804
4805 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4806 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4807 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4808 || cin_iscase(line)
4809 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4810 return TRUE;
4811 return FALSE;
4812 }
4813 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4814 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4815 }
4816 return FALSE;
4817}
4818
4819/*
4820 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4821 * Q&D-Implementation:
4822 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4823 */
4824 static int
4825cin_isinit(void)
4826{
4827 char_u *s;
4828
4829 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4830
4831 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4832 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4833
4834 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4835 return TRUE;
4836
4837 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4838 return TRUE;
4839
4840 return FALSE;
4841}
4842
4843/*
4844 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4845 */
4846 int
4847cin_iscase(s)
4848 char_u *s;
4849{
4850 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4851 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4852 {
4853 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4854 {
4855 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4856 if (*s == ':')
4857 {
4858 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4859 ++s;
4860 else
4861 return TRUE;
4862 }
4863 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4864 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4865 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4866 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4867 else if (*s == '"')
4868 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4869 }
4870 return FALSE;
4871 }
4872
4873 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4874 return TRUE;
4875 return FALSE;
4876}
4877
4878/*
4879 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4880 */
4881 static int
4882cin_isdefault(s)
4883 char_u *s;
4884{
4885 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4886 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4887 && s[1] != ':');
4888}
4889
4890/*
4891 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4892 */
4893 int
4894cin_isscopedecl(s)
4895 char_u *s;
4896{
4897 int i;
4898
4899 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4900 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4901 i = 6;
4902 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4903 i = 9;
4904 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4905 i = 7;
4906 else
4907 return FALSE;
4908 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4909}
4910
4911/*
4912 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4913 * Return NULL if not found.
4914 * case 234: a = b;
4915 * ^
4916 */
4917 static char_u *
4918after_label(l)
4919 char_u *l;
4920{
4921 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4922 {
4923 if (*l == ':')
4924 {
4925 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4926 ++l;
4927 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4928 break;
4929 }
4930 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4931 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4932 }
4933 if (*l == NUL)
4934 return NULL;
4935 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4936 if (*l == NUL)
4937 return NULL;
4938 return l;
4939}
4940
4941/*
4942 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4943 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4944 */
4945 static int
4946get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
4947 linenr_T lnum;
4948{
4949 char_u *l;
4950 pos_T fp;
4951 colnr_T col;
4952 char_u *p;
4953
4954 l = ml_get(lnum);
4955 p = after_label(l);
4956 if (p == NULL)
4957 return 0;
4958
4959 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4960 fp.lnum = lnum;
4961 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4962 return (int)col;
4963}
4964
4965/*
4966 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4967 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4968 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4969 * ^
4970 */
4971 static int
4972skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4973 linenr_T lnum;
4974 char_u **pp;
4975 int ind_maxcomment;
4976{
4977 char_u *l;
4978 int amount;
4979 pos_T cursor_save;
4980
4981 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4982 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4983 l = ml_get_curline();
4984 /* XXX */
4985 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4986 {
4987 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4988 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4989 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
4990 l = ml_get_curline();
4991 }
4992 else
4993 {
4994 amount = get_indent();
4995 l = ml_get_curline();
4996 }
4997 *pp = l;
4998
4999 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5000 return amount;
5001}
5002
5003/*
5004 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5005 * int a, indent of "a"
5006 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
5007 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
5008 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5009 */
5010 static int
5011cin_first_id_amount()
5012{
5013 char_u *line, *p, *s;
5014 int len;
5015 pos_T fp;
5016 colnr_T col;
5017
5018 line = ml_get_curline();
5019 p = skipwhite(line);
5020 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5021 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5022 {
5023 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5024 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5025 }
5026 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5027 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5028 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5029 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5030 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5031 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5032 {
5033 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5034 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5035 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5036 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5037 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5038 p = s;
5039 }
5040 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5041 ;
5042 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5043 return 0;
5044
5045 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5046 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5047 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5048 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5049 return (int)col;
5050}
5051
5052/*
5053 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5054 * char *foo = "here";
5055 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5056 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5057 * foo = "asdf\
5058 * asdf\
5059 * here";
5060 */
5061 static int
5062cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5063 linenr_T lnum;
5064{
5065 char_u *line;
5066 char_u *s;
5067 colnr_T col;
5068 pos_T fp;
5069
5070 if (lnum > 1)
5071 {
5072 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5073 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5074 return -1;
5075 }
5076
5077 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5078 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5079 {
5080 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5081 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5082 else
5083 ++s;
5084 }
5085 if (*s != '=')
5086 return 0;
5087
5088 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5089 if (cin_nocode(s))
5090 return 0;
5091
5092 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5093 ++s;
5094
5095 fp.lnum = lnum;
5096 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5097 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5098 return (int)col;
5099}
5100
5101/*
5102 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5103 */
5104 static int
5105cin_ispreproc(s)
5106 char_u *s;
5107{
5108 s = skipwhite(s);
5109 if (*s == '#')
5110 return TRUE;
5111 return FALSE;
5112}
5113
5114/*
5115 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5116 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5117 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5118 */
5119 static int
5120cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5121 char_u **pp;
5122 linenr_T *lnump;
5123{
5124 char_u *line = *pp;
5125 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5126 int retval = FALSE;
5127
5128 while (1)
5129 {
5130 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5131 {
5132 retval = TRUE;
5133 *lnump = lnum;
5134 break;
5135 }
5136 if (lnum == 1)
5137 break;
5138 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5139 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5140 break;
5141 }
5142
5143 if (lnum != *lnump)
5144 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5145 return retval;
5146}
5147
5148/*
5149 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5150 */
5151 static int
5152cin_iscomment(p)
5153 char_u *p;
5154{
5155 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5156}
5157
5158/*
5159 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5160 */
5161 static int
5162cin_islinecomment(p)
5163 char_u *p;
5164{
5165 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5166}
5167
5168/*
5169 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5170 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5171 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5172 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5173 */
5174 static int
5175cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5176 char_u *s;
5177 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5178 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5179{
5180 char_u found_start = 0;
5181
5182 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5183
5184 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5185 found_start = *s;
5186
5187 while (*s)
5188 {
5189 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5190 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5191 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5192 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5193 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5194 return *s;
5195
5196 if (*s)
5197 s++;
5198 }
5199 return found_start;
5200}
5201
5202/*
5203 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5204 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5205 * no semicolons anywhere.
5206 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5207 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5208 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5209 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5210 */
5211 static int
5212cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5213 char_u **sp;
5214 linenr_T first_lnum;
5215{
5216 char_u *s;
5217 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5218 int retval = FALSE;
5219
5220 if (sp == NULL)
5221 s = ml_get(lnum);
5222 else
5223 s = *sp;
5224
5225 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5226 {
5227 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5228 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5229 else
5230 ++s;
5231 }
5232 if (*s != '(')
5233 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5234
5235 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5236 {
5237 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5238 {
5239 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5240 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5241 * #if defined(x) && \
5242 * defined(y)
5243 */
5244 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5245 s = ml_get(lnum);
5246 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5247 retval = TRUE;
5248 goto done;
5249 }
5250 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5251 {
5252 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5253 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5254 break;
5255
5256 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5257 }
5258 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5259 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5260 else
5261 ++s;
5262 }
5263
5264done:
5265 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5266 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5267
5268 return retval;
5269}
5270
5271 static int
5272cin_isif(p)
5273 char_u *p;
5274{
5275 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5276}
5277
5278 static int
5279cin_iselse(p)
5280 char_u *p;
5281{
5282 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5283 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5284 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5285}
5286
5287 static int
5288cin_isdo(p)
5289 char_u *p;
5290{
5291 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5292}
5293
5294/*
5295 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5296 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5297 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5298 */
5299 static int
5300cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5301 char_u *p;
5302 linenr_T lnum;
5303 int ind_maxparen;
5304{
5305 pos_T cursor_save;
5306 pos_T *trypos;
5307 int retval = FALSE;
5308
5309 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5310 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5311 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5312 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5313 {
5314 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5315 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5316 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5317 p = ml_get_curline();
5318 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5319 {
5320 ++p;
5321 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5322 }
5323 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5324 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5325 retval = TRUE;
5326 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5327 }
5328 return retval;
5329}
5330
5331 static int
5332cin_isbreak(p)
5333 char_u *p;
5334{
5335 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5336}
5337
5338/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5339 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5340 *
5341 * class MyClass :
5342 * baseClass <-- here
5343 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5344 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5345 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5346 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5347 */
5348 static int
5349cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5350 char_u *line;
5351 colnr_T *col;
5352{
5353 char_u *s;
5354 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5355
5356 *col = 0;
5357
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005358 s = skipwhite(line);
5359 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5360 return FALSE;
5361 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005362 if (*s == NUL)
5363 return FALSE;
5364
5365 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5366
5367 while(*s != NUL)
5368 {
5369 if (s[0] == ':')
5370 {
5371 if (s[1] == ':')
5372 {
5373 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5374 * initialization any more */
5375 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5376 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5377 }
5378 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5379 {
5380 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5381 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5382 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5383 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5384 *col = 0;
5385 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5386 }
5387 else
5388 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5389 }
5390 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5391 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5392 {
5393 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5394 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5395
5396 if (*s == 'c')
5397 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5398 else
5399 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5400 }
5401 else
5402 {
5403 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5404 {
5405 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5406 }
5407 else if (s[0] == ')')
5408 {
5409 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5410 * something like "):" */
5411 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5412 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5413 }
5414 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5415 {
5416 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5417 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5418 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5419 }
5420 else if (*col == 0)
5421 {
5422 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5423 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5424
5425 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5426 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5427 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5428 }
5429
5430 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5431 }
5432 }
5433
5434 return cpp_base_class;
5435}
5436
5437/*
5438 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5439 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5440 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5441 */
5442 static int
5443cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5444 char_u *s;
5445 char_u *find;
5446 char_u *ignore;
5447{
5448 char_u *p = s;
5449 char_u *r;
5450 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5451
5452 while (*p != NUL)
5453 {
5454 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5455 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5456 {
5457 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5458 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5459 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5460 if (cin_nocode(r))
5461 return TRUE;
5462 }
5463 if (*p != NUL)
5464 ++p;
5465 }
5466 return FALSE;
5467}
5468
5469/*
5470 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5471 * Return the column found.
5472 */
5473 static int
5474cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5475 pos_T *trypos;
5476{
5477 char_u *line;
5478 char_u *p;
5479
5480 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5481 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5482 {
5483 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5484 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5485 else
5486 {
5487 p = skip_string(p);
5488 ++p;
5489 }
5490 }
5491 return (int)(p - line);
5492}
5493
5494/*
5495 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5496 * Return NULL if no match found.
5497 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5498 * work. */
5499/* foo() */
5500/* { */
5501/* } */
5502
5503 static pos_T *
5504find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5505 int ind_maxcomment;
5506{
5507 pos_T cursor_save;
5508 pos_T *trypos;
5509 pos_T *pos;
5510 static pos_T pos_copy;
5511
5512 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5513 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5514 {
5515 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5516 trypos = &pos_copy;
5517 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5518 pos = NULL;
5519 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5520 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5521 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5522 break;
5523 if (pos != NULL)
5524 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5525 }
5526 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5527 return trypos;
5528}
5529
5530/*
5531 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5532 * Return NULL of no match found.
5533 */
5534 static pos_T *
5535find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5536 int ind_maxparen;
5537 int ind_maxcomment;
5538{
5539 pos_T cursor_save;
5540 pos_T *trypos;
5541 static pos_T pos_copy;
5542
5543 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5544 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5545 {
5546 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5547 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5548 trypos = NULL;
5549 else
5550 {
5551 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5552 trypos = &pos_copy;
5553 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5554 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5555 trypos = NULL;
5556 }
5557 }
5558 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5559 return trypos;
5560}
5561
5562/*
5563 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5564 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5565 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5566 * looking a few lines further.
5567 */
5568 static int
5569corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5570 int ind_maxparen;
5571 pos_T *startpos;
5572{
5573 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5574
5575 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5576 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5577 return ind_maxparen;
5578}
5579
5580/*
5581 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5582 * line "l".
5583 */
5584 static int
5585find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5586 char_u *l;
5587 int start, end;
5588{
5589 int i;
5590 int retval = FALSE;
5591 int open_count = 0;
5592
5593 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5594
5595 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5596 {
5597 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5598 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5599 if (l[i] == start)
5600 ++open_count;
5601 else if (l[i] == end)
5602 {
5603 if (open_count > 0)
5604 --open_count;
5605 else
5606 {
5607 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5608 retval = TRUE;
5609 }
5610 }
5611 }
5612 return retval;
5613}
5614
5615 int
5616get_c_indent()
5617{
5618 /*
5619 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5620 * block should be
5621 */
5622 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5623
5624 /*
5625 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5626 * line is imagined to be.
5627 */
5628 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5629
5630 /*
5631 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5632 * an opening brace.
5633 */
5634 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5635
5636 /*
5637 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5638 */
5639 int ind_first_open = 0;
5640
5641 /*
5642 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5643 * located
5644 */
5645 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5646
5647 /*
5648 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5649 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5650 * brace should be located
5651 */
5652 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5653
5654 /*
5655 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5656 * column is imagined to be
5657 */
5658 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5659
5660 /*
5661 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5662 */
5663 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5664
5665 /*
5666 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5667 */
5668 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5669
5670 /*
5671 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5672 */
5673 int ind_case_break = 0;
5674
5675 /*
5676 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5677 * should be located
5678 */
5679 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5680
5681 /*
5682 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5683 */
5684 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5685
5686 /*
5687 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5688 */
5689 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5690
5691 /*
5692 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5693 */
5694 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5695
5696 /*
5697 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5698 * should be indented
5699 */
5700 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5701
5702 /*
5703 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5704 * should be located
5705 */
5706 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5707
5708 /*
5709 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5710 */
5711 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5712
5713 /*
5714 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5715 * itself is also unclosed
5716 */
5717 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5718
5719 /*
5720 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5721 * unclosed parentheses.
5722 */
5723 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5724
5725 /*
5726 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5727 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5728 * context (for very long lines).
5729 */
5730 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5731
5732 /*
5733 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5734 * an unclosed parentheses.
5735 */
5736 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5737
5738 /*
5739 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5740 * opening parentheses.
5741 */
5742 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5743
5744 /*
5745 * Extra indent for comments.
5746 */
5747 int ind_comment = 0;
5748
5749 /*
5750 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5751 */
5752 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5753
5754 /*
5755 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5756 * after the comment opener.
5757 */
5758 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5759
5760 /*
5761 * max lines to search for an open paren
5762 */
5763 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5764
5765 /*
5766 * max lines to search for an open comment
5767 */
5768 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5769
5770 /*
5771 * handle braces for java code
5772 */
5773 int ind_java = 0;
5774
5775 /*
5776 * handle blocked cases correctly
5777 */
5778 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5779
5780 pos_T cur_curpos;
5781 int amount;
5782 int scope_amount;
5783 int cur_amount;
5784 colnr_T col;
5785 char_u *theline;
5786 char_u *linecopy;
5787 pos_T *trypos;
5788 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5789 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5790 char_u *start;
5791 int start_brace;
5792#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5793#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5794#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5795 linenr_T ourscope;
5796 char_u *l;
5797 char_u *look;
5798 char_u terminated;
5799 int lookfor;
5800#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5801#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5802#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5803#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5804#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5805#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5806#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5807#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5808#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5809#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5810#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5811
5812 int whilelevel;
5813 linenr_T lnum;
5814 char_u *options;
5815 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5816 int divider;
5817 int n;
5818 int iscase;
5819 int lookfor_break;
5820 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5821
5822 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5823 {
5824 l = options++;
5825 if (*options == '-')
5826 ++options;
5827 n = getdigits(&options);
5828 divider = 0;
5829 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5830 {
5831 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5832 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5833 {
5834 ++options;
5835 if (divider)
5836 divider *= 10;
5837 else
5838 divider = 10;
5839 }
5840 }
5841 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5842 {
5843 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5844 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5845 else
5846 {
5847 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5848 if (divider)
5849 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5850 }
5851 ++options;
5852 }
5853 if (l[1] == '-')
5854 n = -n;
5855 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5856 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5857 switch (*l)
5858 {
5859 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5860 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5861 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5862 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5863 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5864 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5865 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5866 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5867 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5868 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5869 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5870 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5871 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5872 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5873 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5874 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5875 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5876 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5877 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5878 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5879 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5880 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5881 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5882 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5883 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5884 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5885 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5886 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5887 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5888 }
5889 }
5890
5891 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5892 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5893
5894 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5895 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5896 * ml_get is valid! */
5897 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5898 if (linecopy == NULL)
5899 return 0;
5900
5901 /*
5902 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5903 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5904 * inserting new stuff.
5905 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5906 * check for that.
5907 */
5908 if ((State & INSERT)
5909 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5910 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5911 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5912
5913 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5914
5915 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5916
5917 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5918
5919 /*
5920 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5921 */
5922 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5923 {
5924 amount = 0;
5925 }
5926
5927 /*
5928 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5929 */
5930 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5931 {
5932 amount = 0;
5933 }
5934
5935 /*
5936 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5937 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5938 */
5939 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5940 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5941 {
5942 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5943 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5944 amount = col;
5945 }
5946
5947 /*
5948 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5949 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5950 */
5951 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5952 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5953 {
5954 int lead_start_len = 2;
5955 int lead_middle_len = 1;
5956 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
5957 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
5958 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
5959 char_u *p;
5960 int start_align = 0;
5961 int start_off = 0;
5962 int done = FALSE;
5963
5964 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5965 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5966 amount = col;
5967
5968 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5969 while (*p != NUL)
5970 {
5971 int align = 0;
5972 int off = 0;
5973 int what = 0;
5974
5975 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5976 {
5977 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5978 what = *p++;
5979 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5980 align = *p++;
5981 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5982 off = getdigits(&p);
5983 else
5984 ++p;
5985 }
5986
5987 if (*p == ':')
5988 ++p;
5989 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5990 if (what == COM_START)
5991 {
5992 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5993 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5994 start_off = off;
5995 start_align = align;
5996 }
5997 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5998 {
5999 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6000 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6001 }
6002 else if (what == COM_END)
6003 {
6004 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6005 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6006 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6007 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6008 {
6009 done = TRUE;
6010 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6011 {
6012 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6013 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
6014 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6015 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
6016 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6017 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6018 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6019 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6020 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6021 {
6022 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6023 break;
6024 }
6025 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6026 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6027 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6028 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6029 continue;
6030 }
6031 if (start_off != 0)
6032 amount += start_off;
6033 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006034 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6035 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006036 break;
6037 }
6038
6039 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6040 * with the middle comment */
6041 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6042 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6043 {
6044 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6045 /* XXX */
6046 if (off != 0)
6047 amount += off;
6048 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006049 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6050 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006051 done = TRUE;
6052 break;
6053 }
6054 }
6055 }
6056
6057 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6058 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6059 * with the first character of the comment text.
6060 */
6061 if (done)
6062 ;
6063 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6064 amount += 1;
6065 else
6066 {
6067 /*
6068 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6069 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6070 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6071 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6072 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6073 */
6074 amount = -1;
6075 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6076 {
6077 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6078 continue;
6079 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6080 break;
6081 }
6082 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6083 {
6084 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6085 {
6086 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6087 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6088 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6089 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6090 }
6091 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6092 amount = col;
6093 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6094 amount += ind_in_comment;
6095 }
6096 }
6097 }
6098
6099 /*
6100 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6101 */ /* XXX */
6102 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6103 && ind_java == 0)
6104 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6105 || trypos != NULL)
6106 {
6107 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6108 {
6109 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6110 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6111 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6112 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6113 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6114 trypos = NULL;
6115 else
6116 tryposBrace = NULL;
6117 }
6118
6119 if (trypos != NULL)
6120 {
6121 /*
6122 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6123 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6124 */
6125 amount = -1;
6126 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6127 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6128 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6129 {
6130 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6131 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6132 continue;
6133 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6134 continue;
6135 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6136
6137 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6138 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6139 {
6140 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6141 continue;
6142 }
6143
6144 /* XXX */
6145 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6146 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6147 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6148 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6149 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6150 {
6151 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6152
6153 if (theline[0] == ')')
6154 {
6155 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6156 cur_amount = amount;
6157 amount = -1;
6158 }
6159 break;
6160 }
6161 }
6162
6163 /*
6164 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6165 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6166 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6167 */
6168 if (amount == -1)
6169 {
6170 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6171 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6172 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6173 {
6174 /*
6175 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6176 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6177 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6178 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6179 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6180 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6181 * lines).
6182 */
6183 if (theline[0] != ')')
6184 {
6185 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6186 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6187 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6188 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6189 {
6190 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6191 * for each additional level */
6192 n = 1;
6193 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6194 {
6195 switch (l[col])
6196 {
6197 case '(':
6198 case '{': ++n;
6199 break;
6200
6201 case ')':
6202 case '}': if (n > 1)
6203 --n;
6204 break;
6205 }
6206 }
6207
6208 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6209 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6210 }
6211 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6212 our_paren_pos.col++;
6213 else
6214 {
6215 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6216 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6217 col++;
6218 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6219 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6220 else
6221 our_paren_pos.col++;
6222 }
6223 }
6224
6225 /*
6226 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6227 * if we did the above "if".
6228 */
6229 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6230 {
6231 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6232 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6233 cur_amount = col;
6234 }
6235 }
6236
6237 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6238 {
6239 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6240 }
6241 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6242 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6243 {
6244 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6245 amount = cur_amount;
6246 }
6247 else
6248 {
6249 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6250 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6251 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6252 {
6253 --our_paren_pos.col;
6254 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6255 {
6256 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6257 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6258 break;
6259 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6260 col = MAXCOL;
6261 break;
6262 }
6263 }
6264
6265 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6266 * braces */
6267 if (col == MAXCOL)
6268 amount += ind_unclosed;
6269 else
6270 {
6271 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6272 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6273 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6274 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6275 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6276 else
6277 amount += ind_unclosed;
6278 }
6279 /*
6280 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6281 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6282 * lines:
6283 * func_long_name( if (x
6284 * arg && yy
6285 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6286 */
6287 if (cur_amount < amount)
6288 amount = cur_amount;
6289 }
6290 }
6291
6292 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6293 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6294 amount += ind_comment;
6295 }
6296
6297 /*
6298 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6299 */
6300 else
6301 {
6302 trypos = tryposBrace;
6303
6304 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6305 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6306
6307 /*
6308 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6309 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6310 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6311 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6312 */
6313 look = skipwhite(start);
6314 if (*look == '{')
6315 {
6316 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6317 amount = col;
6318 if (*start == '{')
6319 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6320 else
6321 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6322 }
6323 else
6324 {
6325 /*
6326 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6327 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6328 */
6329 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6330
6331 /*
6332 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6333 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6334 */
6335 lnum = ourscope;
6336 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6337 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6338 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6339 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6340
6341 /*
6342 * It could have been something like
6343 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6344 * ldfd) {
6345 * }
6346 */
6347 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6348 amount = get_indent();
6349 else
6350 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6351
6352 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6353 }
6354
6355 /*
6356 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6357 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6358 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6359 */
6360 if (theline[0] == '}')
6361 {
6362 /*
6363 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6364 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6365 */
6366 amount += ind_close_extra;
6367 }
6368 else
6369 {
6370 /*
6371 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6372 * to match it with.
6373 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6374 * to match it with.
6375 */
6376 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6377 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6378 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6379 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6380 /* XXX */
6381 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6382 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6383 {
6384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6385 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6386 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6387 {
6388 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6389 goto theend;
6390 }
6391 }
6392
6393 /*
6394 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6395 * failed to find a matching "if").
6396 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6397 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6398 */
6399
6400 /*
6401 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6402 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6403 * location for ind_open_extra.
6404 */
6405
6406 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6407 {
6408 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6409 }
6410 else
6411 {
6412 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6413 amount += ind_open_imag;
6414 else
6415 {
6416 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6417 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6418 if (amount < 0)
6419 amount = 0;
6420 }
6421 }
6422
6423 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6424
6425 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6426 {
6427 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6428 amount += ind_case;
6429 }
6430 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6431 {
6432 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6433 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6434 }
6435 else
6436 {
6437 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6438 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6439
6440 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6441 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6442 }
6443 scope_amount = amount;
6444 whilelevel = 0;
6445
6446 /*
6447 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6448 * with that.
6449 *
6450 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6451 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6452 * that opens the block.
6453 */
6454 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6455 for (;;)
6456 {
6457 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6458 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6459
6460 /*
6461 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6462 * up with it.
6463 */
6464 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6465 {
6466 /* we reached end of scope:
6467 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6468 * go further back:
6469 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6470 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6471 * declaration:
6472 * int x,
6473 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6474 */
6475 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6476 {
6477 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6478 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6479 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6480 {
6481 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6482 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6483 * initialization) */
6484 if (cont_amount > 0)
6485 amount = cont_amount;
6486 else
6487 amount += ind_continuation;
6488 break;
6489 }
6490
6491 l = ml_get_curline();
6492
6493 /*
6494 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6495 * comment.
6496 */
6497 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6498 if (trypos != NULL)
6499 {
6500 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6501 continue;
6502 }
6503
6504 /*
6505 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6506 */
6507 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6508 continue;
6509
6510 if (cin_nocode(l))
6511 continue;
6512
6513 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6514
6515 /*
6516 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6517 * function declaration, we are done
6518 * (it's a variable declaration).
6519 */
6520 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6521 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6522 {
6523 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6524 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6525 * don't add extra indent.
6526 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6527 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6528 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6529 */
6530 if (terminated == ',')
6531 break;
6532
6533 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6534 * we are done.
6535 */
6536 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6537 break;
6538
6539 /* nothing useful found */
6540 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6541 continue;
6542 }
6543
6544 if (terminated != ';')
6545 {
6546 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6547 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6548 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6549 */ /* XXX */
6550 trypos = NULL;
6551 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6552 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6553 ind_maxcomment);
6554
6555 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6556 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6557
6558 if (trypos != NULL)
6559 {
6560 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6561 continue;
6562 }
6563 }
6564
6565 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6566 * like in
6567 * int a,
6568 * b;
6569 */
6570 if (cont_amount > 0)
6571 amount = cont_amount;
6572 else
6573 amount += ind_continuation;
6574 }
6575 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6576 {
6577 if (cont_amount > 0)
6578 amount = cont_amount;
6579 else
6580 amount += ind_continuation;
6581 }
6582 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6583 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6584 {
6585 amount = scope_amount;
6586 if (theline[0] == '{')
6587 amount += ind_open_extra;
6588 }
6589 break;
6590 }
6591
6592 /*
6593 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6594 */ /* XXX */
6595 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6596 {
6597 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6598 continue;
6599 }
6600
6601 l = ml_get_curline();
6602
6603 /*
6604 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6605 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6606 */
6607 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6608 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6609 {
6610 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6611 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6612 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6613 break;
6614
6615 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6616 * labels. */
6617 if (whilelevel > 0)
6618 continue;
6619
6620 /*
6621 * case xx:
6622 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6623 *-> here;
6624 */
6625 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6626 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6627 {
6628 if (cont_amount > 0)
6629 amount = cont_amount;
6630 else
6631 amount += ind_continuation;
6632 break;
6633 }
6634
6635 /*
6636 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6637 * x = 333;
6638 * case yy:
6639 */
6640 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6641 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6642 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6643 {
6644 /*
6645 * Check that this case label is not for another
6646 * switch()
6647 */ /* XXX */
6648 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6649 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6650 {
6651 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6652 break;
6653 }
6654 continue;
6655 }
6656
6657 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6658
6659 /*
6660 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6661 * y = y + 1;
6662 * -> s = 99;
6663 *
6664 * case xx:
6665 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6666 * y = y + 1;
6667 * -> s = 99;
6668 */
6669 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6670 {
6671 if (n)
6672 amount = n;
6673
6674 if (!lookfor_break)
6675 break;
6676 }
6677
6678 /*
6679 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6680 * -> y = y + 1;
6681 *
6682 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6683 * -> y = y + 1;
6684 */
6685 if (n)
6686 {
6687 amount = n;
6688 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6689 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6690 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6691 break;
6692 }
6693
6694 /*
6695 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6696 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6697 * switch label.
6698 * break; <- may line up with this line
6699 * case xx:
6700 * -> y = 1;
6701 */
6702 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6703 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6704 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6705 continue;
6706 }
6707
6708 /*
6709 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6710 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6711 */
6712 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6713 {
6714 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6715 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6716 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6717 continue;
6718 }
6719
6720 /*
6721 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6722 */
6723 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6724 {
6725 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6726 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6727 continue;
6728 }
6729
6730 /*
6731 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6732 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6733 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6734 * unlocked it)
6735 */
6736 l = ml_get_curline();
6737 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6738 || cin_nocode(l))
6739 continue;
6740
6741 /*
6742 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6743 * constructor initialization?
6744 */ /* XXX */
6745 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6746 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6747 {
6748 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6749 {
6750 if (cont_amount > 0)
6751 amount = cont_amount;
6752 else
6753 amount += ind_continuation;
6754 }
6755 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6756 {
6757 amount = get_indent();
6758 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6759 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6760 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6761 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6762 if (theline[0] != '{')
6763 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6764 }
6765 else
6766 {
6767 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6768 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6769 amount = (int)col;
6770 }
6771 break;
6772 }
6773 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6774 {
6775 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6776 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6777 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6778 break;
6779 else
6780 continue;
6781 }
6782
6783 /*
6784 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6785 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6786 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6787 * 123,
6788 * sizeof
6789 * here
6790 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6791 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6792 * (indented).
6793 */
6794 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6795
6796 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6797 && terminated == ','))
6798 {
6799 /*
6800 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6801 * go back to the line that starts it so
6802 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6803 * if ( foo &&
6804 * bar )
6805 */
6806 /*
6807 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6808 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6809 */
6810 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6811 trypos = find_match_paren(
6812 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6813 ind_maxcomment);
6814
6815 /*
6816 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6817 * braces.
6818 */
6819 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6820 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6821
6822 if (trypos != NULL)
6823 {
6824 /*
6825 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6826 * handled above.
6827 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6828 * asdf)
6829 */
6830 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6831 l = ml_get_curline();
6832 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6833 {
6834 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6835 continue;
6836 }
6837 }
6838
6839 /*
6840 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6841 * indent from
6842 * char *usethis = "bla\
6843 * bla",
6844 * here;
6845 */
6846 if (terminated == ',')
6847 {
6848 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6849 {
6850 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6851 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6852 break;
6853 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6854 }
6855 }
6856
6857 /*
6858 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6859 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6860 */
6861 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6862 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6863
6864 /*
6865 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6866 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6867 * while (not)
6868 * -> {
6869 * }
6870 */
6871 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6872 && theline[0] == '{')
6873 {
6874 amount = cur_amount;
6875 /*
6876 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6877 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6878 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6879 * { 1, 2 },
6880 * -> { 3, 4 }
6881 */
6882 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6883 amount += ind_open_extra;
6884
6885 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6886 {
6887 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6888 * class declaration or initialization */
6889 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6890 continue;
6891 }
6892 break;
6893 }
6894
6895 /*
6896 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6897 * Also allow " } else".
6898 */
6899 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6900 {
6901 /*
6902 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6903 * with the last one.
6904 * if (cond)
6905 * 100 +
6906 * -> here;
6907 */
6908 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6909 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6910 {
6911 if (cont_amount > 0)
6912 amount = cont_amount;
6913 else
6914 amount += ind_continuation;
6915 break;
6916 }
6917
6918 /*
6919 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6920 * are finished.
6921 * while (not)
6922 * -> here;
6923 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6924 * before this is terminated.
6925 * yyy;
6926 * if (stat)
6927 * while (not)
6928 * xxx;
6929 * -> here;
6930 */
6931 amount = cur_amount;
6932 if (theline[0] == '{')
6933 amount += ind_open_extra;
6934 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6935 {
6936 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6937 break;
6938 }
6939
6940 /*
6941 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6942 * do, line up with the while()
6943 * do
6944 * x = 1;
6945 * -> here
6946 */
6947 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6948 if (cin_isdo(l))
6949 {
6950 if (whilelevel == 0)
6951 break;
6952 --whilelevel;
6953 }
6954
6955 /*
6956 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6957 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6958 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
6959 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6960 */
6961 if (cin_iselse(l)
6962 && whilelevel == 0
6963 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6964 == NULL
6965 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6966 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6967 break;
6968 }
6969
6970 /*
6971 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6972 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6973 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6974 * the line before this one.
6975 */
6976 else
6977 {
6978 /*
6979 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6980 * the last one.
6981 * c = 99 +
6982 * 100 +
6983 * -> here;
6984 */
6985 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6986 {
6987 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6988 if (terminated == ',')
6989 amount += ind_continuation;
6990 break;
6991 }
6992
6993 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6994 {
6995 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6996 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6997 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6998 * opening brace or we are looking just for
6999 * enumerations/initializations. */
7000 if (terminated == ',')
7001 {
7002 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7003 break;
7004
7005 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7006 continue;
7007 }
7008
7009 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7010 * reduce indent. */
7011 if (amount > cur_amount)
7012 amount = cur_amount;
7013 }
7014 else
7015 {
7016 /*
7017 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7018 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7019 * 100 +
7020 * -> here;
7021 */
7022 amount = cur_amount;
7023
7024 /*
7025 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7026 * are in an initialization or enum
7027 * struct xxx =
7028 * {
7029 * sizeof a,
7030 * 124 };
7031 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7032 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7033 * yet.
7034 */
7035 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7036 {
7037 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7038 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7039 }
7040 else
7041 {
7042 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7043 && *l != NUL
7044 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7045 /* XXX */
7046 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7047 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7048 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7049 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7050 }
7051 }
7052 }
7053 }
7054
7055 /*
7056 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7057 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7058 */
7059 /* XXX */
7060 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7061 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7062 {
7063 /*
7064 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7065 * with the last one.
7066 * while (cond);
7067 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7068 * -> here;
7069 */
7070 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7071 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7072 {
7073 if (cont_amount > 0)
7074 amount = cont_amount;
7075 else
7076 amount += ind_continuation;
7077 break;
7078 }
7079
7080 if (whilelevel == 0)
7081 {
7082 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7083 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7084 if (theline[0] == '{')
7085 amount += ind_open_extra;
7086 }
7087 ++whilelevel;
7088 }
7089
7090 /*
7091 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7092 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7093 * indent of that other statement.
7094 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7095 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7096 */
7097 else
7098 {
7099 /*
7100 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7101 * may be lined up with the case label.
7102 */
7103 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7104 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7105 {
7106 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7107 continue;
7108 }
7109
7110 /*
7111 * Handle "do {" line.
7112 */
7113 if (whilelevel > 0)
7114 {
7115 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7116 if (cin_isdo(l))
7117 {
7118 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7119 --whilelevel;
7120 continue;
7121 }
7122 }
7123
7124 /*
7125 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7126 * the amount for a continuation line.
7127 * x = 1;
7128 * y = foo +
7129 * -> here;
7130 * or
7131 * int x = 1;
7132 * int foo,
7133 * -> here;
7134 */
7135 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7136 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7137 {
7138 if (cont_amount > 0)
7139 amount = cont_amount;
7140 else
7141 amount += ind_continuation;
7142 break;
7143 }
7144
7145 /*
7146 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7147 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7148 * x = 1; x = 1;
7149 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7150 * while (asdf) ->here;
7151 * here;
7152 * ->foo;
7153 */
7154 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7155 {
7156 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7157 break;
7158 }
7159
7160 /*
7161 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7162 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7163 * a terminated line.
7164 */
7165 else
7166 {
7167 /*
7168 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7169 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7170 * the line. Helps for:
7171 * func(asdr,
7172 * asdfasdf);
7173 * here;
7174 */
7175term_again:
7176 l = ml_get_curline();
7177 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7178 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7179 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7180 {
7181 /*
7182 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7183 * handled above.
7184 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7185 * asdf)
7186 */
7187 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7188 l = ml_get_curline();
7189 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7190 {
7191 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7192 continue;
7193 }
7194 }
7195
7196 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7197 * with a statement after it.
7198 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7199 * stat;
7200 * }
7201 * case 2:
7202 * stat;
7203 * }
7204 */
7205 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7206
7207 /*
7208 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7209 * ignoring any jump label.
7210 */
7211 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7212 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7213
7214 if (theline[0] == '{')
7215 amount += ind_open_extra;
7216 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7217 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7218 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7219 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7220
7221 /*
7222 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7223 * that block.
7224 */
7225 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7226 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7227 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7228 != NULL) /* XXX */
7229 {
7230 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7231 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7232 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7233 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7234 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7235 goto term_again;
7236 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7237 }
7238 }
7239 }
7240 }
7241 }
7242 }
7243
7244 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7245 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7246 amount += ind_comment;
7247 }
7248
7249 /*
7250 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7251 *
7252 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7253 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7254 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7255 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7256 */
7257 else
7258 {
7259 /*
7260 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7261 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7262 * of a function
7263 */
7264
7265 if (theline[0] == '{')
7266 {
7267 amount = ind_first_open;
7268 }
7269
7270 /*
7271 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7272 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7273 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7274 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7275 */
7276 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7277 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7278 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7279 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7280 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7281 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7282 {
7283 amount = ind_func_type;
7284 }
7285 else
7286 {
7287 amount = 0;
7288 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7289
7290 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7291
7292 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7293 {
7294 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7295 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7296
7297 l = ml_get_curline();
7298
7299 /*
7300 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7301 */ /* XXX */
7302 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7303 {
7304 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7305 continue;
7306 }
7307
7308 /*
7309 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7310 * initialization?
7311 */ /* XXX */
7312 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7313 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7314 {
7315 if (col == 0)
7316 {
7317 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7318 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7319 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7320 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7321 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7322 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7323 }
7324 else
7325 {
7326 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7327 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7328 amount = (int)col;
7329 }
7330 break;
7331 }
7332
7333 /*
7334 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7335 */
7336 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7337 continue;
7338
7339 if (cin_nocode(l))
7340 continue;
7341
7342 /*
7343 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7344 * indentation:
7345 * int foo,
7346 * bar;
7347 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7348 * enum foobar
7349 * {
7350 * ...
7351 * } foo,
7352 * bar;
7353 */
7354 n = 0;
7355 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7356 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7357 {
7358 /* take us back to opening paren */
7359 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7360 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7361 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7362 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7363
7364 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7365 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7366 * char *foo = "bla\
7367 * bla",
7368 * here;
7369 */
7370 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7371 {
7372 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7373 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7374 break;
7375 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7376 }
7377
7378 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7379
7380 if (amount == 0)
7381 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7382 if (amount == 0)
7383 amount = ind_continuation;
7384 break;
7385 }
7386
7387 /*
7388 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7389 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7390 */
7391 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7392 break;
7393 l = ml_get_curline();
7394
7395 /*
7396 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7397 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7398 */
7399 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7400 break;
7401
7402 /* (matching {)
7403 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7404 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7405 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7406 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7407 */
7408 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7409 break;
7410
7411 /*
7412 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7413 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7414 * parameters.
7415 */
7416 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7417 {
7418 amount = ind_param;
7419 break;
7420 }
7421
7422 /*
7423 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7424 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7425 * int foo,
7426 * bar;
7427 * indent_to_0 here;
7428 */
7429 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7430 {
7431 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7432 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7433 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7434 break;
7435 l = ml_get_curline();
7436 }
7437
7438 /*
7439 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7440 * use the indent of this line.
7441 *
7442 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7443 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7444 */
7445 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7446
7447 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7448 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7449 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7450 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7451 break;
7452 }
7453
7454 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7455 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7456 amount += ind_comment;
7457
7458 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7459 * "asdfasdf\
7460 * here";
7461 * char *foo = "asdf\
7462 * here";
7463 */
7464 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7465 {
7466 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7467 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7468 {
7469 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7470 if (cur_amount > 0)
7471 amount = cur_amount;
7472 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7473 amount += ind_continuation;
7474 }
7475 }
7476 }
7477 }
7478
7479theend:
7480 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7481 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7482
7483 vim_free(linecopy);
7484
7485 if (amount < 0)
7486 return 0;
7487 return amount;
7488}
7489
7490 static int
7491find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7492 int lookfor;
7493 linenr_T ourscope;
7494 int ind_maxparen;
7495 int ind_maxcomment;
7496{
7497 char_u *look;
7498 pos_T *theirscope;
7499 char_u *mightbeif;
7500 int elselevel;
7501 int whilelevel;
7502
7503 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7504 {
7505 elselevel = 1;
7506 whilelevel = 0;
7507 }
7508 else
7509 {
7510 elselevel = 0;
7511 whilelevel = 1;
7512 }
7513
7514 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7515
7516 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7517 {
7518 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7519 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7520
7521 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7522 if (cin_iselse(look)
7523 || cin_isif(look)
7524 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7525 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7526 {
7527 /*
7528 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7529 * we must be out of scope...
7530 */
7531 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7532 if (theirscope == NULL)
7533 break;
7534
7535 /*
7536 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7537 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7538 * out of luck too.
7539 */
7540 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7541 break;
7542
7543 /*
7544 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7545 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7546 * different scope...
7547 */
7548 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7549 continue;
7550
7551 /*
7552 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7553 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7554 * increment elselevel
7555 */
7556 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7557 if (cin_iselse(look))
7558 {
7559 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7560 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7561 ++elselevel;
7562 continue;
7563 }
7564
7565 /*
7566 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7567 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7568 */
7569 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7570 {
7571 ++whilelevel;
7572 continue;
7573 }
7574
7575 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7576 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7577 if (cin_isif(look))
7578 {
7579 elselevel--;
7580 /*
7581 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7582 * get in the way.
7583 */
7584 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7585 whilelevel = 0;
7586 }
7587
7588 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7589 if (cin_isdo(look))
7590 whilelevel--;
7591
7592 /*
7593 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7594 * this must be the if that we want!
7595 * match the indent level of that if.
7596 */
7597 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7598 {
7599 return OK;
7600 }
7601 }
7602 }
7603 return FAIL;
7604}
7605
7606# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7607/*
7608 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7609 */
7610 int
7611get_expr_indent()
7612{
7613 int indent;
7614 pos_T pos;
7615 int save_State;
7616
7617 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7618 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7619 ++sandbox;
7620 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7621 --sandbox;
7622
7623 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7624 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7625 * command. */
7626 save_State = State;
7627 State = INSERT;
7628 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7629 check_cursor();
7630 State = save_State;
7631
7632 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7633 if (indent < 0)
7634 indent = get_indent();
7635
7636 return indent;
7637}
7638# endif
7639
7640#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7641
7642#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7643
7644static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7645
7646 static int
7647lisp_match(p)
7648 char_u *p;
7649{
7650 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7651 int len;
7652 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7653
7654 while (*word != NUL)
7655 {
7656 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7657 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7658 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7659 return TRUE;
7660 }
7661 return FALSE;
7662}
7663
7664/*
7665 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7666 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7667 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7668 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7669 *
7670 * TODO:
7671 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7672 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7673 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7674 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7675 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7676 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007677 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7678 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007679 */
7680 int
7681get_lisp_indent()
7682{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007683 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007684 int amount;
7685 char_u *that;
7686 colnr_T col;
7687 colnr_T firsttry;
7688 int parencount, quotecount;
7689 int vi_lisp;
7690
7691 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7692 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7693
7694 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7695 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7696
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007697 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7698 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7699 else
7700 {
7701 paren = *pos;
7702 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7703 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7704 pos = &paren;
7705 }
7706 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007707 {
7708 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7709 * line that is at the same () level. */
7710 amount = -1;
7711 parencount = 0;
7712
7713 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7714 {
7715 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7716 continue;
7717 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7718 {
7719 if (*that == ';')
7720 {
7721 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7722 ++that;
7723 continue;
7724 }
7725 if (*that == '\\')
7726 {
7727 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7728 ++that;
7729 continue;
7730 }
7731 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7732 {
7733 that++;
7734 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7735 ++that;
7736 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007737 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007738 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007739 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007740 --parencount;
7741 }
7742 if (parencount == 0)
7743 {
7744 amount = get_indent();
7745 break;
7746 }
7747 }
7748
7749 if (amount == -1)
7750 {
7751 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7752 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7753 col = pos->col;
7754
7755 that = ml_get_curline();
7756
7757 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7758 amount = 2;
7759 else
7760 {
7761 amount = 0;
7762 while (*that && col)
7763 {
7764 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7765 col--;
7766 }
7767
7768 /*
7769 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7770 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7771 *
7772 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7773 * (...)) of (...))
7774 */
7775
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007776 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7777 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007778 amount += 2;
7779 else
7780 {
7781 that++;
7782 amount++;
7783 firsttry = amount;
7784
7785 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7786 {
7787 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7788 ++that;
7789 }
7790
7791 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7792 {
7793 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7794 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007795 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007796 firsttry++;
7797
7798 parencount = 0;
7799 quotecount = 0;
7800
7801 if (vi_lisp
7802 || (*that != '"'
7803 && *that != '\''
7804 && *that != '#'
7805 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7806 {
7807 while (*that
7808 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7809 || quotecount
7810 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007811 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007812 && !quotecount
7813 && !parencount
7814 && vi_lisp)))
7815 {
7816 if (*that == '"')
7817 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007818 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7819 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007820 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007821 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7822 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007823 --parencount;
7824 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7825 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7826 (colnr_T)amount);
7827 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7828 (colnr_T)amount);
7829 }
7830 }
7831 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7832 {
7833 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7834 that++;
7835 }
7836 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7837 amount = firsttry;
7838 }
7839 }
7840 }
7841 }
7842 }
7843 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007844 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007845
7846 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7847
7848 return amount;
7849}
7850#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7851
7852 void
7853prepare_to_exit()
7854{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007855#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7856 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7857 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7858 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007859 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7860#endif
7861
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007862#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7863 if (gui.in_use)
7864 {
7865 gui.dying = TRUE;
7866 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7867 }
7868 else
7869#endif
7870 {
7871 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7872
7873 /*
7874 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7875 * screen (if there are two screens).
7876 */
7877 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7878#ifdef WIN3264
7879 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7880#endif
7881 stoptermcap();
7882 out_flush();
7883 }
7884}
7885
7886/*
7887 * Preserve files and exit.
7888 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7889 */
7890 void
7891preserve_exit()
7892{
7893 buf_T *buf;
7894
7895 prepare_to_exit();
7896
7897 out_str(IObuff);
7898 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7899 out_flush();
7900
7901 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7902
7903 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7904 {
7905 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7906 {
7907 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7908 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7909 out_flush();
7910 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7911 break;
7912 }
7913 }
7914
7915 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7916
7917 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7918
7919 getout(1);
7920}
7921
7922/*
7923 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7924 */
7925 int
7926vim_fexists(fname)
7927 char_u *fname;
7928{
7929 struct stat st;
7930
7931 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7932 return FALSE;
7933 return TRUE;
7934}
7935
7936/*
7937 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7938 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7939 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7940 * time, because it can be a system call.
7941 */
7942
7943#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7944# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7945# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7946# else
7947# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7948# endif
7949#endif
7950
7951static int breakcheck_count = 0;
7952
7953 void
7954line_breakcheck()
7955{
7956 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7957 {
7958 breakcheck_count = 0;
7959 ui_breakcheck();
7960 }
7961}
7962
7963/*
7964 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7965 */
7966 void
7967fast_breakcheck()
7968{
7969 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7970 {
7971 breakcheck_count = 0;
7972 ui_breakcheck();
7973 }
7974}
7975
7976/*
7977 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7978 * 'wildignore'.
7979 */
7980 int
7981expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7982 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
7983 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
7984 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
7985 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
7986 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
7987{
7988 int retval;
7989 int i, j;
7990 char_u *p;
7991 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
7992
7993 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7994
7995 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7996 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7997 return retval;
7998
7999#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8000 /*
8001 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8002 */
8003 if (*p_wig)
8004 {
8005 char_u *ffname;
8006
8007 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
8008 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8009 {
8010 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8011 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
8012 break;
8013# ifdef VMS
8014 vms_remove_version(ffname);
8015# endif
8016 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8017 {
8018 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8019 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8020 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8021 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8022 --*num_file;
8023 --i;
8024 }
8025 vim_free(ffname);
8026 }
8027 }
8028#endif
8029
8030 /*
8031 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8032 */
8033 if (*num_file > 1)
8034 {
8035 non_suf_match = 0;
8036 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8037 {
8038 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8039 {
8040 /*
8041 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8042 * of the list.
8043 */
8044 p = (*file)[i];
8045 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8046 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8047 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8048 }
8049 }
8050 }
8051
8052 return retval;
8053}
8054
8055/*
8056 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8057 */
8058 int
8059match_suffix(fname)
8060 char_u *fname;
8061{
8062 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8063 char_u *setsuf;
8064#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8065 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8066
8067 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8068 setsuflen = 0;
8069 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8070 {
8071 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8072 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8073 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8074 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8075 break;
8076 setsuflen = 0;
8077 }
8078 return (setsuflen != 0);
8079}
8080
8081#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8082
8083# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8084static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8085static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8086# endif
8087
8088# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8089/*
8090 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8091 * it's shared between these systems.
8092 */
8093# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8094# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8095# else
8096# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8097# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8098# endif
8099# endif
8100
8101/*
8102 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8103 */
8104 static int _cdecl
8105pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8106{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008107 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008108}
8109
8110# ifndef WIN3264
8111 static void
8112namelowcpy(
8113 char_u *d,
8114 char_u *s)
8115{
8116# ifdef DJGPP
8117 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8118 while (*s)
8119 *d++ = *s++;
8120 else
8121# endif
8122 while (*s)
8123 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8124 *d = NUL;
8125}
8126# endif
8127
8128/*
8129 * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
8130 * in `path'. Called by expand_wildcards().
8131 * Return the number of matches found.
8132 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8133 * at "path[wildoff]".
8134 */
8135 static int
8136dos_expandpath(
8137 garray_T *gap,
8138 char_u *path,
8139 int wildoff,
8140 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8141{
8142 char_u *buf;
8143 char_u *path_end;
8144 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8145 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8146 int ok;
8147#ifdef WIN3264
8148 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8149 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8150# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8151 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8152 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8153# endif
8154#else
8155 struct ffblk fb;
8156#endif
8157 int matches;
8158 int starts_with_dot;
8159 int len;
8160 char_u *pat;
8161 regmatch_T regmatch;
8162 char_u *matchname;
8163
8164 /* make room for file name */
8165 buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8166 if (buf == NULL)
8167 return 0;
8168
8169 /*
8170 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8171 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8172 */
8173 p = buf;
8174 s = buf;
8175 e = NULL;
8176 path_end = path;
8177 while (*path_end != NUL)
8178 {
8179 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8180 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8181 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8182 *p++ = *path_end++;
8183 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8184 {
8185 if (e != NULL)
8186 break;
8187 s = p + 1;
8188 }
8189 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8190 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8191 e = p;
8192#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8193 if (has_mbyte)
8194 {
8195 len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
8196 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8197 p += len;
8198 path_end += len;
8199 }
8200 else
8201#endif
8202 *p++ = *path_end++;
8203 }
8204 e = p;
8205 *e = NUL;
8206
8207 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8208 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8209 * component. */
8210 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8211 if (rem_backslash(p))
8212 {
8213 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8214 --e;
8215 --s;
8216 }
8217
8218 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8219 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8220 if (pat == NULL)
8221 {
8222 vim_free(buf);
8223 return 0;
8224 }
8225
8226 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8227 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8228 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8229 vim_free(pat);
8230
8231 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8232 {
8233 vim_free(buf);
8234 return 0;
8235 }
8236
8237 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8238 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8239
8240 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8241 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8242#ifdef WIN3264
8243# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8244 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8245 {
8246 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8247 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8248 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8249 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8250 if (wn != NULL)
8251 {
8252 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8253 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8254 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8255 {
8256 vim_free(wn);
8257 wn = NULL;
8258 }
8259 }
8260 }
8261
8262 if (wn == NULL)
8263# endif
8264 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8265 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8266#else
8267 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8268 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8269 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8270#endif
8271
8272 while (ok)
8273 {
8274#ifdef WIN3264
8275# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8276 if (wn != NULL)
8277 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8278 else
8279# endif
8280 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8281#else
8282 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8283#endif
8284 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8285 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8286 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8287 && (matchname == NULL
8288 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8289 {
8290#ifdef WIN3264
8291 STRCPY(s, p);
8292#else
8293 namelowcpy(s, p);
8294#endif
8295 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8296 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8297 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8298 {
8299 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8300 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8301 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8302 }
8303 else
8304 {
8305 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8306 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8307 if (*path_end != 0)
8308 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8309 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8310 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8311 }
8312 }
8313
8314#ifdef WIN3264
8315# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8316 if (wn != NULL)
8317 {
8318 vim_free(p);
8319 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8320 }
8321 else
8322# endif
8323 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8324#else
8325 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8326#endif
8327
8328 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8329 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8330 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8331 {
8332 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8333#ifdef WIN3264
8334 FindClose(hFind);
8335# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8336 if (wn != NULL)
8337 {
8338 vim_free(wn);
8339 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8340 if (wn != NULL)
8341 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8342 }
8343 if (wn == NULL)
8344# endif
8345 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8346 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8347#else
8348 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8349 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8350#endif
8351 vim_free(matchname);
8352 matchname = NULL;
8353 }
8354 }
8355
8356#ifdef WIN3264
8357 FindClose(hFind);
8358# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8359 vim_free(wn);
8360# endif
8361#endif
8362 vim_free(buf);
8363 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8364 vim_free(matchname);
8365
8366 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8367 if (matches > 0)
8368 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8369 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8370 return matches;
8371}
8372
8373 int
8374mch_expandpath(
8375 garray_T *gap,
8376 char_u *path,
8377 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8378{
8379 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8380}
8381# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8382
8383/*
8384 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8385 *
8386 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8387 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8388 *
8389 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8390 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8391 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8392 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8393 */
8394 int
8395gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8396 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8397 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8398 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8399 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8400 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8401{
8402 int i;
8403 garray_T ga;
8404 char_u *p;
8405 static int recursive = FALSE;
8406 int add_pat;
8407
8408 /*
8409 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8410 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8411 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8412 * return FAIL.
8413 */
8414 if (recursive)
8415#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8416 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8417#else
8418 return FAIL;
8419#endif
8420
8421#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8422 /*
8423 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8424 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8425 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8426 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8427 */
8428 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8429 {
8430 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8431# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8432 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8433# endif
8434 )
8435 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8436 }
8437#endif
8438
8439 recursive = TRUE;
8440
8441 /*
8442 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8443 */
8444 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8445
8446 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8447 {
8448 add_pat = -1;
8449 p = pat[i];
8450
8451#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8452 if (vim_backtick(p))
8453 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8454 else
8455#endif
8456 {
8457 /*
8458 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8459 */
8460 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8461 {
8462 p = expand_env_save(p);
8463 if (p == NULL)
8464 p = pat[i];
8465#ifdef UNIX
8466 /*
8467 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8468 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8469 * found file names and start all over again.
8470 */
8471 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8472 {
8473 vim_free(p);
8474 ga_clear(&ga);
8475 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8476 flags);
8477 recursive = FALSE;
8478 return i;
8479 }
8480#endif
8481 }
8482
8483 /*
8484 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8485 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8486 * the pattern.
8487 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8488 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8489 */
8490 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8491 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8492 }
8493
8494 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8495 {
8496 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8497
8498#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8499 slash_to_colon(t);
8500#endif
8501 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8502 * "vim c:/" work. */
8503 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8504 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8505 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8506 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8507 vim_free(t);
8508 }
8509
8510 if (p != pat[i])
8511 vim_free(p);
8512 }
8513
8514 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8515 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8516
8517 recursive = FALSE;
8518
8519 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8520}
8521
8522# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8523
8524/*
8525 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8526 */
8527 static int
8528vim_backtick(p)
8529 char_u *p;
8530{
8531 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8532}
8533
8534/*
8535 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8536 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8537 * Returns number of file names found.
8538 */
8539 static int
8540expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8541 garray_T *gap;
8542 char_u *pat;
8543 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8544{
8545 char_u *p;
8546 char_u *cmd;
8547 char_u *buffer;
8548 int cnt = 0;
8549 int i;
8550
8551 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8552 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8553 if (cmd == NULL)
8554 return 0;
8555
8556#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8557 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8558 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8559 else
8560#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008561 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8562 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008563 vim_free(cmd);
8564 if (buffer == NULL)
8565 return 0;
8566
8567 cmd = buffer;
8568 while (*cmd != NUL)
8569 {
8570 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8571 p = cmd;
8572 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8573 ++p;
8574 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8575 if (p > cmd)
8576 {
8577 i = *p;
8578 *p = NUL;
8579 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8580 *p = i;
8581 ++cnt;
8582 }
8583 cmd = p;
8584 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8585 ++cmd;
8586 }
8587
8588 vim_free(buffer);
8589 return cnt;
8590}
8591# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8592
8593/*
8594 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8595 * EW_DIR add directories
8596 * EW_FILE add files
8597 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8598 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8599 */
8600 void
8601addfile(gap, f, flags)
8602 garray_T *gap;
8603 char_u *f; /* filename */
8604 int flags;
8605{
8606 char_u *p;
8607 int isdir;
8608
8609 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8610 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8611 return;
8612
8613#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8614 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8615 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8616 return;
8617#endif
8618
8619 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8620 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8621 return;
8622
8623 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8624 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8625 return;
8626
8627 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8628 if (p == NULL)
8629 return;
8630
8631 STRCPY(p, f);
8632#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8633 slash_adjust(p);
8634#endif
8635 /*
8636 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8637 */
8638#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8639 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8640 add_pathsep(p);
8641#endif
8642 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008643}
8644#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8645
8646#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8647
8648#ifndef SEEK_SET
8649# define SEEK_SET 0
8650#endif
8651#ifndef SEEK_END
8652# define SEEK_END 2
8653#endif
8654
8655/*
8656 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8657 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8658 */
8659 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008660get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008661 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008662 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008663 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8664{
8665 char_u *tempname;
8666 char_u *command;
8667 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8668 int len;
8669 int i = 0;
8670 FILE *fd;
8671
8672 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8673 return NULL;
8674
8675 /* get a name for the temp file */
8676 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8677 {
8678 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8679 return NULL;
8680 }
8681
8682 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008683 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008684 if (command == NULL)
8685 goto done;
8686
8687 /*
8688 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8689 * Don't check timestamps here.
8690 */
8691 ++no_check_timestamps;
8692 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8693 --no_check_timestamps;
8694
8695 vim_free(command);
8696
8697 /*
8698 * read the names from the file into memory
8699 */
8700# ifdef VMS
8701 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8702 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8703# else
8704 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8705# endif
8706
8707 if (fd == NULL)
8708 {
8709 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8710 goto done;
8711 }
8712
8713 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8714 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
8715 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8716
8717 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8718 if (buffer != NULL)
8719 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8720 fclose(fd);
8721 mch_remove(tempname);
8722 if (buffer == NULL)
8723 goto done;
8724#ifdef VMS
8725 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8726#endif
8727 if (i != len)
8728 {
8729 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8730 vim_free(buffer);
8731 buffer = NULL;
8732 }
8733 else
8734 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8735
8736done:
8737 vim_free(tempname);
8738 return buffer;
8739}
8740#endif
8741
8742/*
8743 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8744 * functions.
8745 */
8746 void
8747FreeWild(count, files)
8748 int count;
8749 char_u **files;
8750{
8751 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8752 return;
8753#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8754 /*
8755 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8756 * been used???
8757 */
8758 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8759#else
8760 while (count--)
8761 vim_free(files[count]);
8762 vim_free(files);
8763#endif
8764}
8765
8766/*
8767 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8768 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8769 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8770 */
8771 int
8772goto_im()
8773{
8774 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8775}